JP2018166793A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily enhancing eye-catching power to balls entering a major winning hole.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that a mode in which balls arrive at a distribution device 4850 can be varied by an operation mode of an opening/closing plate while maintaining a state in which balls can pass through a first specific winning hole, and a mode for allowing balls to arrive at the distribution device 4850 is controlled intentionally.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-155538 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball that has entered the big prize opening.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can favorably improve the attention to a ball that has entered a big prize opening. .

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance The entrance switching means for switching between a first state capable of guiding the entrance to the entrance and a second state where the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance cannot be guided to the entrance, and the entrance Detecting means for detecting a ball entering the game, profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the ball passing through the entrance, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit granting means And a profit switching means that can be switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means, and a mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means by an operation mode of the incoming ball switching means It is configured to be changeable.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is configured such that in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the number of balls related to the time when the entrance switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit. The

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a ball is sent to the profit switching means while the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. A starting state is formed to be started.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the attention to the ball that has entered the big winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the number of balls guided to the profit switching means can be changed by the time for which the ball switching means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, attention to the ball can be further improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XII-XII line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XII-XII line | wire of FIG. It is a back perspective view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a back perspective view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XIX-XIX line | wire of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), (c) is the first It is a rear view of a variable prize apparatus, (d) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize apparatus in the XXId-XXId line of FIG.21 (c). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening in a 1st action pattern, (b) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening in a 2nd action pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning award in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening in a 4th operation pattern, and a 2nd specific prize opening, (b) is the 1st specific prize opening and the 1st in a 5th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouths. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXXIVa-XXXIVa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning apparatus, (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball | bowl which reached | attained the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 6th action pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 7th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in an 8th action pattern, (b) is the timing of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 9th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial rear view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening in the 11th action pattern, and the 2nd specific prize opening, and (b) is the 1st specific prize mouth and the 1st in the 12th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouths. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the LII-LII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 13th action | operation pattern, (b) is the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and specific area in a 14th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a back perspective view of the covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of the 1st variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 23, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery of the inner entrance 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are won, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 is referred to as “special design 1 lottery” and is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be called is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a that is normally closed is won for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). The release operation is repeated a maximum of 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the first specific winning port 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Note that there are six types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, “Big Jack a”, “Big Jack b”, and “Big Jack c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific prize opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and is configured to change the number of balls entered into the first variable prize winning device 1000.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Easy state. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  In this embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state ends, and the special symbol lottery is After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the special gaming state is finished, the probability change state of the special symbol is ended according to the number of times of the special symbol lottery. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a to be described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 May be shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol (during special symbol change). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), the special symbol is in a short time state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  Note that the number of lotteries for special symbols to which the above-described special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbol that is in the short time state of the normal symbol described above is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the “special symbol low probability state” means a time when the special symbol is not being probable, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the special symbol probabilistic change.

  In addition, the normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state means a game state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is increased) that is neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the short time of the normal symbol.

  During the probable change of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set in comparison with. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction. That is, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction The number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be increased more than the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and It is good also as what changes at least one among the frequency | counts of opening of the electrically-driven accessory 640a. In addition, during the change of the probability of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. Only the hit probability of the second pattern) may be increased as compared with the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is held for a maximum of 4 times for each type of entrance, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger. The 3rd symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and the 2nd symbol is variablely displayed with the passage of a sphere at a normal entrance (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit b”, “big hit c”, even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. A variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed. On the other hand, if “big hit A” or “big hit a”, any number among all the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including an odd number is added. Fluctuation display in which main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (right-handed navigator) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is in a short-time state. It becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by launching (right hitting). In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a big win is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where a special symbol lottery (the lottery of special symbol 1) is performed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, it is likely to be a big hit (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed hitting in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or the short time state of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the probable state of the special symbol or the short state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits the right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol probable state and the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the player can display a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state, thereby allowing the player to display the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of becoming

  In right-handed navigation, the characters “Aim for the right !!” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can be surely acquired the benefits of being in the special symbol probability changing state and the normal symbol time-saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be right-handed even though the player is not in a period when the player should hit (right-hand) a ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of More specifically, this message is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right stroke in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not changed or a normal symbol is in a short time state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be less likely to be opened in a normal state (even if a right hand is made, it is difficult to make a ball enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if a right strike is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a lottery of a special symbol is reduced as compared with a case where a left strike strikes a ball aiming at the first entrance 64. That is, if a right strike is made in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from losing by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging left-handed.

  When it is determined that the player is making a right strike in the normal state, the characters “Warning” and “Left-handed play!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made aware that the player should not make a right stroke (should make a left stroke). In addition, the hall clerk can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of making a right turn in a normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right turn warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not a right hand is made, for example, when a right hand is made, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) through which the ball can flow. Judgment is based on whether or not the ball has been made.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big win state), if it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning port 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, A strike warning image may be displayed. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence / absence of fraud simply by confirming the presence / absence of a right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special game state (a big win state), a signal indicating that a fraud has been made to the hall computer. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 on which the fraud is being performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, a case where a ball entering the first specific winning port 1000a is detected although it is not in a special gaming state (a big win state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word “warning” is displayed large in the center portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the lower part of the screen, the text “Please call a gate error agent” is displayed. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can promptly request repairs or the like from a hall clerk or the like.

  Each time the sphere passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Is displayed so as to alternately light up for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after displaying the variation of the second symbol. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter when the probability of the special symbol or the normal symbol is shorter than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed and during normal time.

  It should be noted that, during special symbol probabilities or during normal symbol time shortening, the hit probability is increased, or the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are increased to the second entrance 640 by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the 2nd symbol is set shorter than that in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or in the normal symbol time, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and the ball that flows down to the right of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of 4 times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and at the second symbol retention lamp 84. Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the number of assembling of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to one and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 as viewed from the front, a second entrance 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entry due to the on of the second entrance switch is turned on. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, for example, the first prize The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 may be five.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during the probability change of a special symbol and the time of a normal symbol than in the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol is also short. In the display, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed. Therefore, the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a will be in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second entrance 640 when the special symbol is being changed and when the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, when the ball wins the second entrance 640, the probability of the jackpot (bonus A, jackpot a) from which the maximum profit (out) is obtained as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won This is set higher than when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  During normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. Therefore, the first entrance 64 without the electric accessory is entered. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunities are obtained by winning at the first entrance 64, It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is changing or when the normal symbol is shorter or shorter, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened by passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the sphere passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”). ), It is advantageous for the player to pass the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 It becomes.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first entrance 64 (lower left side of the second entrance 640), and is opened in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is won by a special symbol lottery performed due to winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 1000a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state in which a ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate and rotate the opening / closing plate 1300 to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. It operates to repeat alternately.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000 a, 640 are guided to a not-shown ball discharge path through the first out port 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. And a solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected to the MPU 201. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable prize-winning device 1000 enters the second entrance 640 of the balls that flow down to the right of the variable time device unit 80 when the player hits the right by the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. Instead of the sphere, almost all of the sphere that has flowed downstream is guided to the flow path forming section.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, a covering front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covering front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmission member 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by the rotation, and the power transmission member A driving device 1500 that drives 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of a sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the back side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 is a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and the thin plate member 1110 is recessed from the front side to the back side, and the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is provided. A housing portion 1120 that is housed and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 that is a through-hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing portion 1120 in front view, and a sphere flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A projecting portion 1140 that projects in accordance with the path, a discharge port 1150 that ejects a sphere from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation that projects from the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and supports the power transmission member 1400. The support portion 1160 and the support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the restriction member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150 are mainly used. Provided.

  The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and a rectangular shape thereof. A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 back and forth of the thin plate member 1110 1123.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. The That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the pre-covering plate 1200.

  The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the recess is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Thereby, in the posture (closed state) in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is tilted, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where it comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 of the covering front plate 1200. The ball that flows down is decelerated by contacting the projecting portion 1140. A similar projecting portion 1235 is also disposed in the storage flow path 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a protruding height that is uniform to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape that is coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotational tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end portion in front view of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a container 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end of the container 1230. The detection sensor 1240 is mainly provided.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion in front view of the side wall portion 1220, the left side wall portion in front view of the housing portion 1230, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which a sphere flows down in the vertical direction. The part is composed.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down, and protrudes toward the back side in the middle part of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a protruding portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

  The storage flow path 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent into a front U-shape, and the opening passes through the main body member 1100 to pass a sphere. A flow path is formed. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow path 1231 is formed is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) that is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. And a surface 1231b.

  The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the front side (right side in FIG. 12) reaching the rolling surface 1231b of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 projects to a position where it can abut against the sphere flowing down the storage flow path 1231 and decelerates the sphere by abutting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left in front view. Thereby, the sphere landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled leftward and guided to the flow path forming unit.

  The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage, and the number of winning prizes is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the sphere rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the sphere is dropped downward without coming into contact with the sphere due to a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting along the longitudinal direction from the short-side end portion of the plate portion 1310 and a base portion of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side when viewed from the front, along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which a ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the ascending posture (open state) along the short direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to a length equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in a cross-sectional arc shape at an upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

  The plate portion 1310 is long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped entrance prevention portion 1331 extending on the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intermediary transmission portion 1332 extending on the back side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intermediary transmission portion. And an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from the right side of the rear view 1332 (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 includes a chamfered portion 1333a that extends to a position that interferes with the operation locus of the power transmission member 1400 and is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a instead of the corner portion contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body portion 1410 in the axial radial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 that projects from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

  The projecting pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the projecting pin 1412 is displaced as the tip member 1520 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, thereby transmitting power. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching excitation, and a front end member 1520 having a front view H-shape (a shape that includes a concave portion on the top and the bottom) disposed at the distal end of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. Is mainly provided.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 accommodated inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. The member 1100 side surface is mainly provided with the extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 having a thickness larger than that of the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 is configured to overlap with the discharge port 1150 (the sphere discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150) in a tilted posture (posture where the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the lower position, storage state). In such a manner that it is narrowed to such an extent that it is not performed.

  The restricting member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the rising posture (the posture in which the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, the discharge state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 that is a through hole through which a sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The sphere discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 is covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be placed along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at intervals through which the spheres can pass, in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the sphere in between, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like without being guided by the opening / closing plate 1300 is blown laterally and is detected). 1240) can be prevented.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, since the control member 1600 will be in a discharge | emission state in the closed state of the opening-and-closing plate 1300, a ball | bowl is discharged | emitted from the storage flow path 1231. FIG. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which a sphere is not stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated with an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the pre-covering plate 1200 is prevented from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 from its right end. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the pre-covering plate 1200. Therefore, as compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to such an extent that it abuts against the pre-covering plate 1200, the necessary material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the diameter of the movement trajectory of the short end of the opening / closing plate 1300, it is easy to avoid interference between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball passing through the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state in the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel. It is stored in. Therefore, in FIG. 10, a state where a sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing a sphere up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten spheres are stored in the storage device 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball serves as a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere attempts to pass the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can hardly enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the detection sensor 1240 detects the tenth ball, the ball remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flows down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, when the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharged state in accordance with the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but is stopped at a position where it cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

  When the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the tenth sphere is stored while receiving a load from the entrance prevention unit 1331 during the switching. It is pushed into the inside of the path 1231 (see FIG. 21B). That is, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a manner that blocks the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and in the middle of the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while being in contact (rubbed) with the ball, the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are shifted. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to set a limit for a period from when the predetermined number of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening / closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and the setting can be arbitrarily set. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started at 0.2 msec from the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after waiting until the tenth sphere comes into contact with the ninth sphere (after the center of the sphere passes the front side of the entrance prevention unit 1331 and is located on the detection sensor 1240 side). ) In order to operate the opening and closing plate 1300, the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled to open and close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 described above, in this embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In this embodiment, the prevention (delay) of the entry of the sphere can be performed only for the eleventh sphere. In other words, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special gaming state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

  For example, in the case of a structure in which the winning of the following ball is delayed by decelerating the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 once at the passing position, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, while the first ball Since each of the tenth spheres is partially linked and rolls on the rolling surface 1311, the spheres are decelerated, so the time until the tenth sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a configuration for decelerating the first ball to the tenth ball is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed at the flow speed, so that the game can be sped up.

  In addition, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in an open state due to repairs such as ball clogging and a game is started at the end of the period, there is no ball entering the detection sensor 1240. Since there is no slowdown in meaning, more balls can be entered.

  For the eleventh sphere, no matter how fast it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts the tilting operation), regardless of the speed. The eleventh sphere can be physically prevented from passing the detection sensor 1240 by the tenth sphere.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement | positioning of the sphere which retains in the storage flow path 1231 is demonstrated. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated.

  Here, the mechanism by which the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged the same every time will be described. First, the ball P <b> 1 that first enters the empty storage flow path 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231 a that is inclined rearward at the bottom of the storage flow path 1231, and is disposed at a position that contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. The

  The sphere P <b> 1 is weighted when the subsequently entered sphere P <b> 2 reaches the lower end, and settles to the arrangement shown in FIG. 12. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). In other words, depending on the state of tilting in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is disposed, the pachinko machine 10 may approach the covering front plate 1200 side, or may approach the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, the projecting portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 contacts the sphere P2, so that the sphere P2 is in contact with the sphere P1 when the sphere P2 is in contact with the main body member. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The sphere P2 is weighted by reaching the position where the subsequently entered sphere P3 contacts the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 has the sphere P2 and the protruding portion 1235 on the right side of the sphere P2 at any position in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is inserted between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 so that the ball P3 cannot contact the thin plate member 1210 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is located on the back side (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the sphere P2 is moved toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the sphere P3. Thereby, the sphere P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the sphere P3 receives a load from the sphere P4 that subsequently enters the ball, and the sphere P3 receives a load under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed). Settles to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the nth ball that has entered the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) th ball. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage flow path 1231, but the cross-sectional area of the storage flow path 1231 is maintained larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the protruding portions 1140, This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the stored ball | bowl can be fixed to a unique position, preventing generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl clogging.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by arranging the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the spheres are stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of stored items every time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge | release of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 is demonstrated. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the state in which the sphere P1 is discharged and the sphere P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b is shown in FIG. 13B. In FIG. 13B, the sphere P2 is discharged and the sphere P3 is the position of the sphere P2 in FIG. A state of being arranged in FIG.

  As will be described later, when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the restricting member 1600 is in a discharge state, and the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When discharging the ball. The sphere (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) arranged at the lowermost end is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are discharged in order.

  Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (channel extending in the left-right direction), the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is reduced. Since the direction becomes larger than the flow speed of the sphere P2, a gap is generated between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the sphere P2 to the sphere P1 when the sphere P1 is discharged can be minimized, the speed at the time of discharging the sphere P1 is uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 abut against the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are turned to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-rear direction component, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage flow path 1231 by contacting the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored balls are stopped. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is generated between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at the time of discharge of the sphere P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P2.

  That is, as the following sphere flows down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the increase in the number of stored spheres causes a change in the acceleration method of the subsequent sphere due to gravity, and accordingly, the discharge mode of the sphere P2 (the speed at the time of discharge, The discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, but the change in the discharge mode is caused by the action of the projections 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent one) It is possible to suppress this by the action of eliminating a load due to gravity by making a gap between the ball and the ball.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, whereby the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball that rolls out on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the discharge mode of the spheres (e.g., the speed during discharge and the discharge interval) can be made uniform.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the spheres (speed during discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In addition, the discharge | emission aspect of a sphere is made into the aspect which requires about 0.2 second for one sphere to be discharged | emitted in this embodiment. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or more, it is possible to discharge all the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along line XVI-XVI in FIG. FIG. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300. Spaced apart.

  Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the restricting member 1600, the restricting member 1600 is not subjected to a load from the intervening transmitting portion 1332, and the restricting member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharged state by the biasing force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 protrudes in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is less than the projected area of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. FIG. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotational tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The intermediate transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates. In this state, the extending portion 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the intermediate transmission portion 1332 and the posture of the restriction member 1600 Is switched to a tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In this embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. The structure that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state is maintained. The large biasing force of the torsion spring allows the restriction member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharge state, thereby leading to the effect of quickly discharging the sphere from the storage flow path 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operation from the closed state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. Is switched to the outside of the operation locus E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The operation locus E1 is illustrated as an outer shape of a movement locus of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface that forms the rotation direction. And applied in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges the restricting member 1600 is directed to push the opening / closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power regardless of how large the urging force is. The solenoid 1510 is not applied via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the opening / closing plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 is excited so as to generate a driving force enough to switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. However, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even when a variable load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, the load given by the weight of a sphere is illustrated as a fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 is configured such that a sphere is landed on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the sphere is landed, a load due to the weight of the sphere is received, and the number of the spheres frequently changes. 1300 is given a fluctuating load. Further, for example, the regulating member 1600 is loaded from a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, particularly a sphere disposed at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231, and therefore there is a case where the sphere is present or not. A variable load is given.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept open. For this reason, even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically determined that more spheres (10 or more spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thus, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept in an unauthorized state to prevent an unauthorized increase in the number of winning balls to be acquired.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in time series. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 in -XXId line.

  20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 maintain the assembly state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. The other configurations are not shown, and the state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 changes state from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in time series.

  That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). In FIG. 20C, the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B. In FIG. 21 (c) and FIG. 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. The states of 1520 being displaced and arranged at positions (final arrival positions when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 are respectively illustrated.

  In FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated with an imaginary line as a reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as illustrated is an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the posture as it is. In FIG. 20C, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 come into contact with each other.

  As a result, the power transmission member 1400 can be given momentum before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously with the start of rotation of the power transmission member 1400. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state (See FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the ball portion flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (right side of FIG. 21 (b)) by the plate portion 1310 projecting to the front side. The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (FIG. 21 (b) clockwise), but the tip member 1520 moves rightward in the rear view (FIG. 21 (a) rightward) to transmit power. Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the opening / closing plate 1310 can be prevented from rotating by the weight of the sphere.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21 (b), it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing downward through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 while allowing the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 and the problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 (which shortens the interval) conflicting therewith. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the sphere is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 by extending the plate portion 1310 to a middle position while maintaining the discharge of the sphere. Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is configured to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position spaced below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ball on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state, and the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000 can be effectively maintained. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG.21 (d), at the same time as the opening-and-closing plate 1300 switches to an open state, the control member 1600 is switched to a storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be shared with the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the opened state has been described. However, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the opened state to the closed state, it can be grasped by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the movement amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharged state after the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharged state. Can do. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning that the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a slightly later timing after the ball starts to be discharged.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311 and jumps. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the middle of being opened from the open state, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the sphere contacts, a load that supports the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the opposite direction to the weight direction of the sphere does not occur. Therefore, when the sphere comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves down with the weight of the sphere, and thus the sphere cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, irregular winning can be prevented.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 22B schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first per-random number counter acquired based on the start winning matches with any one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is A, 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed according to the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49”, the big hit B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is B, the 8-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

  A jackpot C is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in any case, if the big win is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance slot 64), the first variable prize winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the big hit game also increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance slot 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, but the jackpot of four rounds with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot is a, as in the jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, the 15 round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (in this embodiment, 1200), and the time taken for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot c is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time taken for the jackpot game exceeds the jackpot a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for a ball or jackpot game varies.

  As described above, when the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds remains unchanged, the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and jackpot c), the time required for the big hit game can be lengthened compared to when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a big hit (big hit b and big hit c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing of hitting the ball aiming for the next big hit is delayed as compared with the case of the big hit a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of award balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency can be reduced) obtained by the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type. Difference in the number of payouts included).

  As a result, in the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the jackpot (bonus a) that can receive a large amount of time-efficient payout, and the time-efficient payout Also, a small jackpot (big hit b, big hit c) can be provided, and the player's profit obtained when the big hit a is obtained can be increased. Thereby, while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts when playing a game for a predetermined time (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) A gaming machine capable of increasing the difference) can be configured.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol can be made, the special symbol prone change state is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and when the big win is likely to become a big hit a (the biggest hit of big ball). Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a change in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23B is a timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged as a whole. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per unit regardless of the number of storage. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds of furniture.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round can be formed by discharging the sphere at the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, since the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a after the second round, the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be advanced rapidly.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per unit regardless of the number of storage. Is done. Accordingly, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, if ten balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, the balls may be discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. In this case, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the sphere at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Accordingly, in the second and subsequent rounds, there may occur a state where a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Accordingly, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to fifteenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, in the 15-round jackpot game, the elapsed time and the number of payouts are compared between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern. The sphere can be launched at intervals of the shortest 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. When the time required for continuing 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the big hit game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five in the second round can be won. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10 s) + (T1 (6 s) + Int2 (1 s)) + (T1 (30 s) + Int2 (1 s)) × 13R + T1 (30 s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only 5 balls can be won in round games R in the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, while it takes more than three times as long as playing the jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the payout ball is about half, and the time efficiency of getting a ball Is dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player when a jackpot game is performed with the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rarity value of jackpot A and jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 seconds, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values and can be changed at each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible.

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, only two spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. When 10 are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so the number of payouts is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When the number of the balls is stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (more time). In this case, there is no ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the next round game R, and it is possible to win 10 balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be desired to shorten the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Since the ball is discharged in the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a state where no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the second round is formed. (In this embodiment, ten) pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the corresponding balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Accordingly, the award ball can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to tenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the solenoid 1510 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means, and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the 11th round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 12th to 15th rounds is repeated between each round game R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the sphere at the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the 11th round, there may occur a state in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Accordingly, the progress of the round game R is delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

  In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out in each round game is reduced compared to the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the big hit of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15) and the degree of payout in the jackpot game (number or speed, etc.) It can be changed (by timing) depending on how many round games are being played.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final stage is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may be increased toward the end of the game, or the payout number may be peaked in the middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game depending on what round game R is performed, the jackpot game is moderated and the interest of the player is improved. Can be made.

  In addition, when a jackpot game is played in the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the 10th round, so the player pays out the expected payout in the first operation pattern. The jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to be 1.5 seconds, and in the other jackpot type, the second second between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. The interval time Int2 can be set in advance such that the odd round is set to 0.5 seconds and the even round is set to 1.0 seconds.

  That is, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds by further subdividing the jackpot type. Accordingly, in the eleventh round and thereafter, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is completed, and the attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it respond | correspond with the change of the grade of payout, and the presentation displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (refer FIG. 2). For example, when playing a big hit game with the third action pattern, the LCD screen displays the figure of the character to be run, and the character's stamina remains in the beginning (the first round) is displayed. Characters that run will perform well and many prize balls will be paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina disappears (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and walks, and in conjunction with this, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by matching the degree of payout of the prize ball and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to transfer the emotion to the liquid crystal effect, and to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game It is possible to proceed over the production time. In other words, for example, when a ball is awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends during the first playback of a moving image that is loop-played over a predetermined production time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the effect of winning the jackpot is completely watched.

  In addition, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Do your best” next) is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thus, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without stressing the player.

  On the other hand, it is good also as a display of the aspect which gives a stress by a player. For example, a case will be described in which a character running during a jackpot game is displayed and the character is displayed to rest in a rest area in an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, every time a specified number of balls are won, an interval is set between rounds, so the character can complete without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the prescribed number of winnings is not achieved and the interval between rounds is not reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which fatigue accumulates without causing a deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short in the first place, An effect that there is no time to rest can be performed. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and stress the player, it is possible to increase the player's aspiration to recover at the next jackpot.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, it may be an effect that the character rehydrates in accordance with the winning timing. In this case, in the first operation pattern, water can be sufficiently replenished, but in the second and third operation patterns after the 11th round, the number of times of water replenishment (number of winning prizes) is the first. Compared to the action pattern, the character will run for a longer period (the jackpot game period), so the amount of water that can be replenished is less than the character's sweat, and the character gets tired more and more. The effect can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to match the character's appearance with the profits obtained by the player (payout ball including time efficiency), and how much the jackpot won by the player is (medium hit? The player can easily determine whether the game is a big jackpot or a super jackpot) through the production of the whole jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the number of the balls which can be stored inside the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 1000 was fixed, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 2000 in 2nd Embodiment is a ball which can be stored inside. It is comprised so that the number of can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, when a ball enters from the second specific winning port 2255a, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the second storage channel 2251 are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable prize winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that in the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and a second variable winning device 2800 that is newly provided in the second embodiment. Note that the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable entry device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout passes in the big hit game.

  The second specific winning port 2255a is a winning port having the same function as the first specific winning port 1000a. That is, when a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed). (Or until 10 balls are won), the opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed by a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 is in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding portion 1140, outlet 1150, rotation support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170). Also, a slide guide hole 2181 that is a through-hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and a holding hole 2182 that is similarly a through-hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and linearly extending in the left-right direction, and a pair of walls along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 A transmission guide rib 2184 having wall portions arranged in parallel and extending in a straight line in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that pivotally supports a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed on the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the interposition rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the front covering plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second housing 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, and has a second opening whose upper end is connected to the middle of the storage flow path 1231. A second detection disposed in the second storage flow path 2251 in a posture along the opening in the extending direction of the second storage flow path 2251 near the upper end of the storage flow path 2251 and the second storage flow path 2251. The front side of the second housing 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 are closed at the left side of the opening of the sensor 2255 and the second storage channel 2251 when viewed from the front, and the upper surface is inclined downward toward the left. And an inclined surface 2257 to be mainly provided.

  When the sphere is stored inside the second storage portion 2250 through the second detection sensor 2255 and the discharge port 1150 is blocked and the sphere is stored, the second storage flow path 2251 has the number of stored spheres. It is configured to have a maximum of 14 pieces.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific prize opening 2255a and produces the same action as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the sphere enters the accommodation unit 1230 by switching the opening / closing plate 1300, the sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the sphere is accommodated via the second accommodation unit 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the sphere to flow down to the side where the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed. Accordingly, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and have not entered the second storage flow path 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured in a mode toward the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. The Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player can open any one of the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning port 1000a is open or the second specific winning port 2255a is open. If it is in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is disposed inside the second storage flow path 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (when the remaining one sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255, a predetermined number is reached), a plurality of spheres flow into the second storage flow path 2251. , A structure in which more than a specified number of balls can enter.

  In addition to the configuration (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630) provided in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, the restricting member 2600 further extends to the left, and the extending portion 1620. The second extending portion 2640 is formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

  As will be described later, the second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening / closing plate 1300 to be used regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs a switching operation or the opening / closing plate 1300 performs a switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation.

  The second variable prize-winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and an abdomen with one end supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 that is connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projects from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; One end of the rod 288 is fixed to the member 2820 and is slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and one end is disposed at a position where the end can be brought into contact with the intermediate rod 2850. 2184 is extended along the inside of 2184 and the other end of the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The intervention rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183 while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 increases as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 increases. Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184 while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to approach each other as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 becomes longer (narrow each other), so Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  In addition, the surface of the mutual edge part which the interposition rod part 2850 and the transmission rod part 2860 contact | abut is inclined and formed in the aspect which faces an other party member. Thereby, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the interposition rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the restricting member 2600 is formed in a cross-sectional arc shape in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the restricting member 2600 is directed to the discharged state. The urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the sphere cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making the second detection sensor 2255 in a state where a ball can be entered will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in time series. FIG. 27A to FIG. 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for explanation is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changing from the closed state to the open state is omitted. This is illustrated in time series.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the state where the tip member 2820 is disposed farthest from the solenoid 2810 is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited in FIG. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is disposed at the middle position of the movement range is disposed in the state in which the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each of these states is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. The open state that enables the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in a non-excited state, it is possible to prevent the restricting member 2600 from being stored due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains with non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Thus, a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment can be configured.

  Further, when the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the slide plate 2840 is displaced via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 is started to be displaced via the interposition rod portion 2850 due to the displacement of the tip member 2820. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposition rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 abut is slightly spaced in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 is started almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod portion 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end portion of the interposition rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is pushed down slightly, and is in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the tip member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the interposition rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the storage state. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the interposition rod portion 2850 faces the transmission rod portion 2860 side and slides so that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860, so that the interposition member 2850 is moved from the transmission rod portion 2860. It is possible to flow the load applied toward the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the interposed member 2850.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition member 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposition member 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. The load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 can be prevented from fluctuating, and therefore the solenoid 2810 is driven to keep the slide plate 2840 whose state changes due to the displacement of the tip member 2820 open. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction generated by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 with respect to switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810. Thereby, since it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the restricting member 2600, it is possible to suppress the deviation between the control value of the discharge number designated for each interval time between rounds in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

  Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) toward the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the restriction by the interposed rod portion 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that became the special symbol lottery opportunity. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), Since it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following, in this embodiment, a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit. explain.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is defined in association with jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the jackpot d is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 99”, the big hit e is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  When the jackpot e is reached, the 15-round jackpot game is executed in the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase amount, but the difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is higher than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the number of payouts is increased, the time required for the big hit game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the big hit d.

  As described above, when the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds is unchanged, the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R in the first to seventh rounds). When a predetermined number of balls are entered into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout amount is deducted and the progress of the eighth round is made in a specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) thereafter. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can obtain the extra amount of balls to be paid out by causing the first variable winning device 2000 to enter a predetermined number of balls or more without being deducted. Configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of jackpot e, the game method that allows the player to obtain the highest profit as the profit including time efficiency is to keep the specified number of winnings until the eighth round, and round games R after the ninth round. The goal is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the prescribed number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or unfavorable to put more than a specified number of balls in the first variable prize-winning device 2000 depending on the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing changes in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1st specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12 balls) in each round game R can be awarded to the second specific winning opening 2255a according to the passing timing of the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. At the start of the round game R immediately after that, the exceeding number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of stored balls when entering the ball from the second storage channel 2251 side is 14, in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the prescribed number is 15 rounds. Limited to 4 through jackpot games. Accordingly, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winnings) more than a predetermined number that can be acquired by a player who performs a jackpot game of jackpot d to 60 (= 15 × 4C). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 controls the drive so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12 balls) in each round game R can be awarded to the second specific winning opening 2255a according to the passing timing of the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that more than 10 balls in each round game R have won the second specific winning port 2255a. At the start of the round game R immediately after that, the exceeding number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third to seventh rounds is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapse of time, the eighth round game R is started.

  In the eighth round, the solenoid 1510 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the eighth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if more than the specified number of balls have passed through the second specific prize opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the eighth round game R Since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the eighth round, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the prescribed number up to the seventh round) from the prescribed number is performed. Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is made uniform to the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in round game R of the eighth round, after waiting for the lapse of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the round of the next round It will move to the game.

  For this reason, the player must feel that the extra balls that were paid out in the 7th round will be lost, and the 8th round game R will be longer than necessary. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to direct the game to be played carefully so as not to win more than the specified number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the winning of balls exceeding the prescribed number, and to improve the fairness of the game.

  If there are no winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. The round game R of the eighth round can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Accordingly, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, intentionally suppressing the winnings exceeding the specified number until the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the player's attention in the games up to the seventh round.

  When the eighth round of jackpot game R ends, the timer means controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the elapse of time Int1, the ninth round game R is started. In addition, at the time of the start of the round game R of the ninth round, it is possible to make a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the ninth round, the solenoid 2810 starts to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific prize winning opening 2255a. To control the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 10th to 15th rounds is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the round game R after the ninth round, the opening / closing plate 1300 does not open / close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specified prize opening 2255a beyond the prescribed number after the ninth round are , The player can receive without being deducted.

  Therefore, when a jackpot game with a jackpot e is performed, until the seventh round, the jackpot game R is controlled so as not to win the second specific winning port 2255a exceeding the specified number, and the jackpot game R after the ninth round is defined. Aiming to win more than the number of second specific winning holes 2255a is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the greatest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  In other words, in the round game R of each round, by placing more than the specified number of balls into the second specific prize opening 2255a, it is possible to cause the player to gain profit and to suffer damage. As a result, different gameplays can be given for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who plays the jackpot game can be improved (can prevent the jackpot game from being played casually) .

  In addition, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive payout of additional prize balls by winning more than the specified number of balls in the second specific prize opening 2255a is substantially the 9th round or later. Can be limited. As a result, the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.) can be narrowed, and the payout ball can be prevented from changing greatly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and flows down to the downstream of the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open falls as it is, but the third embodiment is described. The first variable prize-winning device 3000 is configured such that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the fall of the sphere is delayed so that a part of the spheres can be awarded to the first specific prize opening 1000a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pre-installation plate 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable prize-winning device 3000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covering front plate 3200 that are slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. In FIG. 32, the open / close plate 1300 is shown in a closed state.

  The main body member 3100 is in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170). An additional prize opening 3181 disposed in a manner connected to the left side wall in front view of the covering front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall part in front view of the additional prize opening 3181 And a curved extending plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

  The additional prize opening 3181 is a ball outlet that discharges the balls flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit is set to 15 when the balls enter the additional prize opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of the sphere flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the vertical direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . Further, the curved extending plate 3182 is formed in a shape that inclines downward as it goes from the middle abdomen to the left in the front view and descends as it goes from the middle abdomen to the right in the front view.

  In addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, storage portion 1230, and detection sensor 1240) provided in the front cover plate 1200 of the first embodiment, the front cover plate 3200 is provided between the side wall portion 1220 and the storage portion 1230. In this region, a fall delay plate 3250 is provided extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side.

  The fall delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement path of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 3250, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. The extended plate portion 3251 extending vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 are connected, and the upper surface has a concave curved shape. A rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape on the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down (including bounce and flow down by rolling) half the length of the plate. It is formed from the shape to do. The opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that the ball flows down in one second or less when the sphere flows down a distance half the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extending plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is inclined and formed in such a manner that the separation width from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as the detection sensor 1240 is approached. An opposing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b which is a surface facing the surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is such that the radius of the sphere in the portion disposed vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is disposed on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In a portion that is switched to a radius greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere at the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and that is disposed vertically below the center of the sphere in the state of being disposed on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. The radius is greater than or equal to the sphere and less than the sphere diameter.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the opposing surface 3251a extends along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 3200. (A tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance at the time of a sphere rolling on the rolling arc part 3252 in the front-back direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls down on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball is dropped from the rolling arc portion 3252, is positioned downstream as Pf2. To flow down.

  In the present embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 of the opposing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3250 is less than the diameter of the sphere, until the sphere reaches the fall position Pf3. The sphere is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the sphere falls from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, an aspect of the flow of the sphere on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. In FIG. 34B, a sphere disposed at the upstream position Pf1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 34C, a sphere disposed at the downstream position Pf2 is illustrated. In FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34B and FIG. 34C, the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the sphere to the contact portion with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction) is shortened as it flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the diameter length r1 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is made shorter than the radius of the sphere.

  These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere is rotated about the axis along the front-rear direction as the rotation axis. In other words, if the rotational speed of the sphere is the same, the rolling speed of the sphere decreases (the sphere is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, the rolling speed of the sphere can be reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, the extended plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300. In FIG. 34 showing the axial view, FIG. 34 (c) is compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). In the state shown in (), the sphere is displaced downward. That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be displaced from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Thus, even if the ball preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation where a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the first variable winning device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35A shows the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35B and 35C show the opened state of the opening / closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35C shows the opening / closing plate 1300. The external shape of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, an example of a sphere that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable prize-winning device 3000 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the sphere that has landed on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the closed state as it is, it drops after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, due to the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling speed of the sphere can be gradually reduced, the rolling time of the sphere can be maintained longer, and the attention to the sphere can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, when the opening / closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up and down along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the sphere contacts at the start of the movement of the sphere faces in the front-rear direction, the operation of the sphere at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be made smooth. it can.

  The flow-down direction when the sphere moves upward and rolls down on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 is parallel to the flow-down direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared with the case where the flow direction of the sphere changes before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, the feeling of discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the sphere before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be alleviated. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is disposed below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the open / close plate 1300 moves upward to open the sphere. Is pushed back (reversely flows) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, so that it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, a ball that is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and has once been unable to win the first specific winning opening 1000a can be put into the first specific winning opening 1000a by moving upward. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, both FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B illustrate a state in which the sphere is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 because there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, due to the action of the fall delay plate 3250, the sphere can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

  In addition, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. The player can have a sense of expectation that he may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the player's attention can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the closed state, the falling of the sphere reaching the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then the rolling surface 1311 when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. By being configured to be able to be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that has reached in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. The number of balls passing through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the opening of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being hindered due to the sphere being arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of an opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the opening / closing plate operates to insert a ball between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There was a problem that the opening of the board was hindered, and there was a risk of loss for the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation shaft of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sphere is maintained almost constant (restricted). can do. Therefore, the sphere is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the sphere freely flows down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the sphere from the rotation shaft is freely changed. The risk of hindering the operation of the plate 1300 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate in the middle of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing to the open state, and is slightly higher than the arrangement of the spheres that may hinder the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the sphere that has reached the first variable prize-winning device 3000. FIG. In FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is left unattended, the flow of the two balls that have reached the first variable prize-winning device 3000 is shown in time series. In FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball A ball when the two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 by performing a special method of hitting the ball weakly and hitting the second ball strongly (so-called “twisting”). Are shown in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the sphere is released and the first sphere P1 and the second sphere P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 with a predetermined interval, When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, since it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 flows down the fall delay plate 3250, it is easy to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 in series, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When switching to the state, since the ball P2 is arranged near the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the ball P2 is dropped. Fall from plate 3250.

  Thus, in this embodiment, compared to the case where two spheres flow down in a series by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) It is easier to receive the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds into a state in which it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game due to a special method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, a state immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the opened state is illustrated, and a ball that jumps upward by colliding with the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

  In this embodiment, when a ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, a bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 bounces back while the open / close plate 1300 moves upward. Only the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bounced ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 or winning the additional prize opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive a payout of the winning ball by the bound ball. Therefore, a situation in which a ball that has reached the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during which the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66 and the player cannot obtain profits. Can be prevented.

  In addition, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls can be awarded in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout due to winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) to be paid out beyond the prescribed number. That is, since the player can make a difference in the profits obtained by whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing that the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, It is possible to improve attention to the sphere that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In 1st Embodiment, the case where the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol was provided as added value after the end of jackpot was given irrespective of the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball that entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable prize-winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that performs a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol based on a difference in the flow-down mode of the sphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, a probability window is formed in which a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable prize winning device 4000 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable prize winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulating member. 1600 and a rear cover 1700), and a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow path in which a sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a flow path branched into a bifurcated flow that communicates with a communication path 4810 that extends vertically downward and a lower end of the communication path 4810. A probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, a specific region 4830 that is in communication with the channel on the left side of the probability variation determination channel 4820 in front view, and a channel that is in communication with the channel on the right side in front view. A non-specific region 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with the game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, a specific region detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of the game ball in the specific region 4830, And a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed with a length of approximately one second before the ball that has entered from the discharge port reaches the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (form an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (closed state). A sorting operation member 4851 that is operable between the closed position and a solenoid 4852 that drives the sorting operation member 4851 is mainly provided.

  It is only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right side for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). The present embodiment is configured in such a manner that, in a high probability state of a special symbol, the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and a ball can easily win a second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol probable state), for example, 40 A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1 /.

  When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, a special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, there are five types of special jackpot types: “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 includes each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot D is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 49”, the big hit E is associated and defined (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot E is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, the big hit F is associated and defined (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot F is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit G is associated and defined (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is G, five rounds of jackpot game are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 750 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be surely acquired. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to a probable change state (high probability state) of special symbols.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is defined in association with it (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot f is reached, similarly to the jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, the big hit g is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot g is reached, a five-round jackpot game is executed with the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to a probable change state (high probability state) of a special symbol.

  As described above, if the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the first variable prize-winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 have a 95% probability. Operates with an operating pattern. At this time, the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be acquired almost certainly, so the special symbol 1 can be drawn by lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64). It is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the jackpot is won. Therefore, in order to obtain a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. Do.

  During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol is lengthened (1 Second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once it is possible to make a transition to the probable change state of the special symbol, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if it is a big win, it will make a big hit f (almost certainly the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state). It is easy for players to win a large number of prize balls because the probabilistic state of special symbols that are likely to become a big hit) can be repeated. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the opening pattern of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41A is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41B is a first specific prize in the seventh operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are controlled to be held, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the second round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, as with the start of the second round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first specification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the case of the round game R in the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R in the third round is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to receive the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the passage of OP3, the solenoid is operated to move the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second) and to keep the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has passed. 4852 is driven to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This predetermined time is set as a time during which passage of the sphere to the specific area 4830 is not permitted.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to launch a ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest speed, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a prescribed number. That is, as a general estimate, only about 5 balls can be made to enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Accordingly, the round game R in the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage flow path 1231 is filled by approximately 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so that the feeling of discomfort given to the player due to the time of the round game R of the fourth round being shorter than the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  When the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than seven (when the number of stored items is up to six), the second opening time OP2 is the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of storage is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged spheres is longer. It is set as a time shorter than the time when the part of the sphere passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this embodiment, the round game R of the fourth round is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even if the round game of the fourth round ends at the second operation time T2, Seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily formed. Accordingly, since the sorting operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the round game R of the fifth round. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be operated without a sense of incongruity. This will be described below.

  In the prior art, when the specified number of balls have won the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R has ended before the start of the operation of the distribution operation member 4581, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation (it was opened twice within one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game is to switch whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a by the round game R immediately before the fifth round can enter the specific area 4830. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state. Since the sphere heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

  Therefore, in this operation pattern, even when the sorting operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the round game R in the fifth round, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the winning mode. can do.

  In addition, since the ball that won the first specific prize opening 1000a in the round game R in the fifth round stays in the storage flow path 1231 during the first operation time T1, the first game in the round game R in the fifth round It is possible to prevent the ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state. Accordingly, the player may acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol according to the winning mode to the first specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that whether or not it can be changed.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the seventh operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

  When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to receive the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the passage of OP3, the solenoid is operated to move the sorting operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second) and to keep the sorting operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has passed. 4852 is driven to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to launch a ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest speed, but it takes 6 seconds to fire a prescribed number. That is, as a general estimate, only about 5 balls can be made to enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Accordingly, the round game R in the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, the storage channel 1231 is not filled by approximately five winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state in a state where the balls that have won in 3 seconds remain in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the outlet 1150 in the interval immediately before the round game R in the fifth round is about five, so that for some rare reason, eight or more balls in three seconds are the first prize opening. Unless winning 1000a, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have passed through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  Therefore, when the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state, no sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round are the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern also in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the above.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to the vicinity of the full capacity of the storage channel 1231 during the round game R of the fourth round. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the sphere, so that it accumulates in the storage flow path 1231. The attention to the sphere can be improved. Thereby, attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter the round game R in the fourth round, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Yes, but because the time of the round game R is short, the more the player gets used to the game, the more the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern will fail. Easy situations are formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to play while hitting a jackpot game, while a player who is used to playing is easier to avoid hitting and avoiding a round to avoid wasted balls between the big hits. Is the difference arising from

  More specifically, in the case of a play game, a plurality of balls are always flowing in the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a ball is awarded to the first specific winning port 1000a immediately after the start of the round game R in the fourth round. Therefore, if there are 3 seconds, there is enough room for 3 or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

  On the other hand, when the round game R is started after the start of the round game R in the fourth round, and when the ball is stopped between rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval period, Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 if it has not been for a while since the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, if 2 seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more spheres in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to direct a player who has become accustomed to the game to hit the game while hitting the jackpot game.

  In this way, the sixth operation pattern inherently has a risk that the profits obtained by those who are used to the game will be reduced depending on the manner of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, it is possible to direct the player to play with a big hit and to ensure the fairness of the profits obtained by the game.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, it is possible to provide a jackpot game requiring concentration that cannot be tasted by other pachinko machines 10 for a player who stops the rounds after grasping the risks described above. . That is, the number of wasted balls can be reduced by performing a round-stop shot in which the calculation is started so that the ball flows into the first specific prize opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific prize opening 1000a in the fourth round. However, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, before the end of the round game R of the third round, the round is stopped, and the start is started before the end of the round game R of the third round. That is, it is necessary to perform advanced calculation to start launching while predicting the timing of entering the ball while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering during the round game R of the third round. Accordingly, when the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Fig.42 (a) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area | region 4830 in an 8th action pattern, FIG.42 (b) is the 1st specific prize in a 9th action pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the eighth operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses in the timer means (not shown). And after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, in the round game R in the fourth round, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. The process ends when

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. This opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation after the third opening time OP3.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage) When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the discharged spheres pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round game R starts with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, if there are seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the sorting operation member 4851 may be opened with the spheres remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, since the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round are the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern also in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the above.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the ninth operation pattern. Since the process up to the end of the third round of round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses in the timer means (not shown). And after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting operation member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Accordingly, in the round game R in the fourth round, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, the round game R in the fourth round is 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. The process ends when

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. This short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round continues at the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage) When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the discharged spheres pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the round game R in the fourth round is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game R in the fourth round, a prescribed number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to finish the round game R of the fourth round without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the round game R of the fourth round is terminated without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the round game R of the fourth round is terminated by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases Immediately after that, the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and then the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, if the sorting operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is finished, and if there are 7 or more balls discharged in the immediately following interval, The sphere can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not rush the specified number of winnings, but by making the specified number of balls win at the first specific winning opening 1000a just before the end of the round game R of the fourth round, It is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state).

  As another method, the round game R of the fifth round immediately after the fourth round is terminated at an appropriate timing, so that the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the round game R of the fifth round are placed in a specific area. Even by making it flow down, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to this operation pattern, the player can change to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning port 1000a, etc.). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be varied.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R in the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is designated (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player can receive a special symbol no matter how the game is played by continuing to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to a certain probability change state (high probability state), it is possible to play a game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the predetermined number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the sphere flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of uplifting to acquire the promising state by himself. Thereby, improvement of a player's interest can be aimed at.

  As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the round game of the fourth round with the interval remaining immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R in the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gameability in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the round game R in the third round is long enough to discharge all the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to transition to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. It is difficult to get. That is, it is possible to realize the gameability that the payout of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is increased when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. This makes it possible to prepare a larger number of balls that the player launches in a normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the player's cash investment.

  Since these differences can be grasped by whether or not a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, at the start of the round game R in the fourth round, the player expects the state after the end of the jackpot game can do. And even in the case of an operation pattern where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to a certain symbol (high probability state) of a special symbol, the right to shift to a certain symbol (high probability state) depending on the form of the sphere It is possible to get

  Here, in this embodiment, the player's concentration can be maintained by pressing the player to select. In other words, the game mode that makes it easier to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the opposite.

  Specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a. While winning the chance increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol (there is an advantage in winning many balls from the start of the fourth round) In the case of 9 operation patterns, in the round game R of the 4th round, a predetermined number of balls are won until the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol (there is an advantage in suppressing the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes depending on the way of winning the ball in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to maintain concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 are operated based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the process up to the end of the round game R in the fourth round is the same as that in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening / closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds) after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the sorting operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short-time operation, the sphere cannot basically flow down to the specific region 4830.

  In addition, since the sorting operation member 4851 is opened during the round game R of the fifth round, if the round game can be finished early, the ball that won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. However, in this operation pattern, the round game R in the fifth round starts with a ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be terminated early. Therefore, the ball won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of time.

  In this operation pattern, the operation modes of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R in the fifth round have the same parts as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The effect similar to the effect in 6 operation | movement patterns can be show | played.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R in the fourth round. Since the pattern of the other parts is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  In the tenth operation pattern, in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern, even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the round game R of the fourth round, the ball flows down to the specific area 4830. It differs in that it can not.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, even if the player can store the ball in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in the fourth round to the full, the discharged ball is not relieved. It can be prompted to confirm whether or not to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the storage channel 1231 can store the ball, and the sorting operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It can be divided into the stage (second step) of whether or not, and attention can be paid to different parts for each stage. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually and to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a winning ball corresponding to a jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress of the game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment The 5000 includes a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire more balls as the number of changes until the jackpot is acquired in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is reduced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable prize-winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covering front plate 2200, and the like, as in the second embodiment. In addition to including the opening / closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, A ball exit adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the ball exit by entering the ball entering the second entrance 640 into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end portion of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming portion 5423 has its lower end extended to a position where it contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  The second variable prize-winning device 5800 can be slid up and down in the left direction in the rear view of the interposition bar part 5850 and the transmission bar part 2860 in addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment. It is arranged so that it can be brought into contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball adjusting device 5900 by being pushed down by the branching portion of the interposition rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the interposition rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment). A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The ball exit adjusting device 5900 is formed by penetrating the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow passage forming portion 5910 for flowing down the ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640 and the flow passage forming portion 5910 for storage. A communication hole 5920 provided in a manner (opening diameter and arrangement) that allows a sphere to flow into the flow path 1231, and an opening / closing member 5930 that opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. Note that the flow path forming unit 5910 is arranged in such a manner that it passes through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable prize-winning device 5800, and is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding. In addition, the intermediate portion is not shown.

  The flow path forming part 5910 is a bifurcated flow path in which a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 flows, and the opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball is connected to the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be allowed to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and further enters the second entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow path 5911 includes a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow path that is curved by a half turn near the lower end portion, and the second entrance 640 from the upper end portion of the deceleration flow path 5912. And a drop channel 5913 extending in the vertical direction toward the rear.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load applied to the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 by the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere staying in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. In other words, the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the subsequent sphere from the subsequent sphere, so that the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination near the communication hole 5920 (an inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform, regardless of the number of staying balls.

  Since the falling flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the ball that flows down does not undergo deceleration and falls freely. Accordingly, when balls enter the second entrance 640 in succession, the previous ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and the subsequent ball is erroneously prevented by preventing the subsequent ball from flowing down. Thus, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the surplus ball discharge channel 5915.

  In this embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the spheres to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying spheres is 30, the upper end of the 30th sphere becomes the surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915. The channel length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the balls after the 31st ball enter the surplus ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, 30 balls at the maximum stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can aim the next jackpot while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball that entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state toward the end of the high probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is disposed at a position protruding to the inside of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not energized, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 are connected, and can be moved in the left-right direction as the solenoid 1510 is driven. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, a slide rail portion 5933 which is disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supports the movable closing member 5931 with respect to the connecting rod portion 5932 so as to be relatively movable up and down. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward biasing force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state where the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state where the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay, the third ball sphere AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is held at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a in this state flow into the storage channel 1231. A space for entering the storage channel 1231 is filled with the sphere IP 51 into which the sphere AP 54 held at a position not missing from the 5920 flows. Therefore, the sphere retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the position as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized, and the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhanging adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 as the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharged state. Inflow of the sphere is restricted.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 is completed, the sphere AP 54 that has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920 is the top by switching to the state shown in FIG. 46A again. Until the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of the spheres from the adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 is repeated, and the number of inflows is defined at a maximum of three for each opening of the communication hole 5920. The

  Referring to FIG. 47, a case where a big hit game progresses by driving solenoid 1510 will be described. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in time series.

  47A, the solenoid 1510 is energized, and in FIG. 47B, the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47). FIG. 47C shows a state where the time difference forming portion 5423 is placed above the engaging portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass therethrough.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is engaged. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restriction member 2600 maintains the storage state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the spheres that have stayed in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged. That is, in the drive of the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path is adjusted according to the momentum of the discharge of the sphere from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing in from 5911.

  48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 2810 are shown in time series. FIG. 48A shows a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B shows a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, thereby opening the communication hole 5920. Thereby, the sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231. On the other hand, when the solenoid 1510 is not excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

  In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the mechanism described above, a certain number of balls (maximum of three in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1. And if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state. The present embodiment is configured in such a manner that, in a high probability state of a special symbol, the hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and a ball can easily win a second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, there are three types of special jackpot types: “hit H”, “hit h”, and “hit i” (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a are different depending on the type of jackpot so that the number of balls that can enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 includes each of the big hit types and the special hit types. It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is defined in association with jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  When the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19” and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or jackpot h is reached, the 15 round jackpot game is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls, can receive a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a specified upper limit payout.

  When the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “20 to 99” and the big win i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot is i, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of winning balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered at the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is acquired.

  In other words, when a special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big hit, it is possible to pay out a specified number of prize balls regardless of the timing of the big hit, If the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the winning ball will be awarded according to the number of entrances to the second entrance 640 until the big hit. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for a jackpot game are variable, the game in which the winning of a right-handed game is different from the game of winning a jackpot in a right-handed game is different. Can add sex. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played loosely, and to improve the attention to each variation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1st specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 are operated based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning port 2255a, and the first round game R ends.

  In the round game R of the first round, with the opening of the second specific prize opening 2255a, the communication holes 5920 are opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). 2 When storing spheres from the storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that the number of spheres flowing from the communication hole 5920 (1 to 1) 3), the round game R can be ended with a predetermined number (10C) of winnings.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means solenoids 1510 and 2810 keep the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the second storage flow path 2251 at the end of the round game R of the first round. It is possible to discharge all balls that can be stored continuously (up to 14 balls).

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int3 between rounds, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific prize opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 controls the drive so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three spheres flow from the adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excitation). Therefore, even when the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire flow is stored until the end of the big hit game (at the end of the round game R of the tenth round). Since the ball can be entered into the path 1231, the big hit game can be completed in a state where no ball remains in the storage flow path 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 holds the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. Since the fourth round game R is the same as the eleventh operation pattern, the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is opened to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening / closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning a predetermined number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R of the fifth round, it is possible for the ball to flow from the through hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of the sphere from the through hole 5920 is actually performed, a specified number of spheres cannot be won. Accordingly, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the fifth round of this operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the same round in the eleventh operation pattern. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operating time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is lengthened.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated between the round games R with the third interval time Int3 between rounds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace and open and close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 1510 controls the drive so that the timer means holds the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

  In this operation pattern, the decrease in the number of prize balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R and the extension of the round time from the round game R in the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 from the through hole 5920. Depending on the number of spheres remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the big hit, how much a decrease in the number of prize balls or an extension of the round time varies. While the number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres that have passed through the second entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 (second entrance) Therefore, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lotteries for the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lotteries of special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 are described. Will be described assuming that the number is the same.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, the three specific balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 by opening the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a once. In other words, up to round game R in the fourth round, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, after the transition to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more. .

  Therefore, the number of winning balls will be reduced if the jackpot is acquired 12 times after the transition to the high probability state until the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is received 12 times. Since the round time is not extended, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

  Also, after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls is reduced for each lottery and the round time is extended for every 3 lotteries, so the player for how many lotteries can win the jackpot You can improve your attention.

  That is, for example, when a big win is obtained with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), it is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Since the number of spheres flowing into the flow path 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. Further, when a big hit is obtained with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the game R Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of award balls paid out in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 by flowing into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round Will be 0. Accordingly, from the round game R of the sixth round, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning slot 1000a, and thus the round game R of the sixth round can be ended. There is no change in the degree of extension.

  Further, when the jackpot is won, the remaining number of the adjustment flow paths 5911 is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when it is 19 to 21, it is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. The number of prize balls in the round game R of the 8th round in the case of the number, the number of prize balls in the round game R of the 9th round in the case of 25 to 27, and the number of prize balls in the round game R of the 10th round in the case of 28-30 pieces And an increase in round time.

  Thus, as in this embodiment, in the game where the high probability state ends with the number of lotteries, when winning a jackpot shortly after the transition to the high probability state, and when winning the jackpot just before the end of the high probability state Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profits given to the player (the number of prize balls paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, when the number of lottery until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery even with the remaining number of lotteries, but the dissatisfaction of the player that the lottery cannot be received can be partially solved.

  In other words, if you win a jackpot in the first lottery after entering the high probability state, you should have added the remaining 29 lotteries and then received 59 lotteries. Actually, the player's dissatisfaction with the high probability state after the jackpot game is limited to 30 times can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of a game can be maintained.

  Even in the high probability state, when the big winning is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the second specific prize opening 2255a is set in the 11th operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may perform a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first entrance 64 in a high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case where a right-handed game is performed, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 does not lead to the special symbol lottery, and the interval for receiving the lottery increases, and the game time is increased. There is a risk of becoming longer.

  Therefore, as a method of gaming in a high probability state, the player can reduce the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 until winning the jackpot, and can receive a maximum number of payout types in a short time ( If you aim to win jackpot h) (whether you play right-handed), be prepared to increase the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 by the time you win the jackpot, and the game time will be longer. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim at winning a jackpot type (hitting jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in the game (whether to make a left-handed game). Thereby, the range of the game method to select can be expanded according to a player's taste and the situation (game possible time etc.) put.

  Note that after the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911. However, in the big hit type of jackpot type (hit H) that can be obtained by the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by a predetermined number of winnings, the profits given to the player (the profits in both the number of winning balls and the game time) are not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays a game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. The player can start the game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the second entrance) In the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of winning the jackpot is that of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is acquired. It should be noted that the number is not the same as the number of lotteries.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed as the ball wins the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has been won by the lottery, Since it is after a button press effect or the like, it is normal that the player keeps driving the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to hold up to 4 balls entering the second entrance 640, an ordinary game mode (a game mode in which a player can draw lots efficiently, so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination, a state where a maximum of about four balls are entering the second entrance 640 is maintained.

  Also, even if a player enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is maximum, the lottery is not received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911. Therefore, there is a profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game. Increased chance of decline. Since the hold is digested when the change stops and the next change starts, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the more likely the player's profit to be reduced in the jackpot game It will be.

  Therefore, if the ball is left unattended during a highly anticipated performance such as long reach, it is possible to form a game that increases the possibility that the profits that the player can obtain in the jackpot game are reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a highly anticipated performance such as long reach, thereby eliminating the concentration that the player has spent on adjusting the shooting power of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on production such as long reach, and to improve attention to the production.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In 1st Embodiment, although the case where the arrangement | positioning of the sphere stored by the storage flow path 1231 was fixed to a unique position was demonstrated, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 6000 in 6th Embodiment interferes with a sphere by drive. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the sphere discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is in the specific region 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not it passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of first variable winning device 6000 taken along line LII-LII in FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering member 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600, and In addition to the rear cover 1700), the sixth embodiment includes a new interference device 6900.

  The interference device 6900 is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and has a solenoid 6910 whose slide movable shaft is disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the distal end of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. And an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined so as to approach the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is supported by a through-hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 disposed to face the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the rear end is a long hole 6921. As the solenoid 6910 is driven, the rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921. By this back-and-forth operation, it is possible to enter the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is disposed at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. By causing the interference member 6930 to slide forward from the through hole H61, the ball P3 is pressed and pushed upstream of the storage flow path 1231.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. FIG. 53A shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is indicated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in a sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is retracted, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is extended. Subsequent spheres are pushed into the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231 and remain in the storage number of less than 10 spheres. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number for each round game R of the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized using this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation state of the special symbol), for example, four minutes A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is finished, a special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. The game is configured to be set to a normal state after the game ends. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be in a short time state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of special jackpot types, “big hit I” and “big hit j”. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state).

  Specifically, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the jackpot is I, two rounds of jackpot game are executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 285 prize balls, and can almost certainly not obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  When the jackpot j is reached, a two-round jackpot game is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As mentioned above, when a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol is almost certainly obtained. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win. Therefore, in order to obtain a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. Do.

  During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol is lengthened (1 Second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big win, the jackpot j (almost certainly the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is transferred. It is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls because the probable state of the special symbol that becomes a big hit that can be acquired) is easily repeated. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific prize opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific prize in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

  In FIG. 54, for easy identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed by the time relationship described below.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 are operated based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer unit (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long-term operation time TL, and the solenoid 6910 is driven so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again after the elapse of the long-time operation time TL. Control the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the overhang state only for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a prescribed number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53B). In this embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and therefore, the interference member 6930 is not waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, it is impossible to win a prescribed number of balls, and the first round game R ends when the first operating time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold them respectively in the retracted state, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 are operated based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses in a timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference members 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the first specific winning opening 1000a by displacing the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the sorting means 4851 is closed until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And after the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer unit (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for a minute time (in this embodiment, 0.2 seconds), and after the minute time has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a prescribed number of round games are played in the first round game. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, the opening / closing member 1300 is closed while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the sphere can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. During the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first time. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing plate 1300 to close the first specific prize opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold them respectively in the retracted state, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time when the number of winning balls is 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, the sphere of the player is blocked by the sphere, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to the movement of the third and subsequent spheres within the storage flow path 1231, so that the player recognizes whether or not the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of winning the ball in the first specific winning port 1000a and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without causing the player to feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can do.

  Then, the ball is stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round game R does not end so that the player feels strange and actually counts the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to form a new gameability that recognizes the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation visually recognized through the game board 13 (the change in the state of the interference member 6930). It is possible to notify the player of the difference in jackpot type by notifying the change in the situation of the game board 13 in a manner that is easy to recognize from the sense of incongruity given. Accordingly, it is possible to improve attention to the first variable winning device 6000.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In 3rd Embodiment, when the opening-and-closing plate 1300 became a closed state, the case where the ball | bowl arrange | positioned in the perpendicular position of fall position Pf3 fell as it was was demonstrated, but the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 7000 in 7th Embodiment is as follows. The second fall delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball arranged at the vertical position of the fall position Pf3 can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to a line. The first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the pre-covering plate 7200, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, housing portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and fall delay plate 3250. ) In addition to the second fall delay plate 7260 newly provided in this embodiment.

  The second fall delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210 between the end surface 3251b and the accommodating portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 is separated from the detection sensor 1240. Tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is extended backward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second fall delay plate 7260 has a distance from the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 that is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) from the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second fall delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the sphere depending on the path of arrival of the sphere. This will be described below.

  58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 58A shows a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the vertical position of the drop position Pf3. In FIG. 58B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the sphere is arranged in the vicinity of the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere becomes a front cover plate as the plate portion 1310 tilts forward when the opening / closing plate 1300 operates. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it contacts the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the sphere, the momentum of the sphere Is large, it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling vertically on the back side of the second fall delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the ball rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 moves along the rear slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while touching.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is disposed below the second fall delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extending to the back surface is determined from the movement trajectory of the sphere. Also, the ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while being fastened on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not contact the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls as it is after reaching the drop position Pf3. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the sphere can be dropped without a stagnation from the lower end of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the case where the sphere is subjected to the action of the second fall delay plate 7260 and the case where it is not received can be switched depending on from which side the sphere approaches the second fall delay plate 7260.

  In this embodiment, two balls are rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the fall delay plate 3250 to a position facing the end surface 3251b, and the previous ball Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state by passing through the detection sensor 1240, the fall of the sphere disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240 can be delayed.

  In addition, even when two balls are not connected, when the ball that was rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 happens to be closed. Also, the sphere can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250 after rolling the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the left.

  Therefore, the sphere can be substantially maintained on the near side of the opening / closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time required for rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (spheres that flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. Anyway. In this case, the sphere stored between the second outlet and the first outlet can be prevented from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second outlet restricting member. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of balls discharged between when the balls are discharged from the first outlet and when the balls are discharged from the second outlet. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge the entire ball can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is composed of an opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and can guide a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when placed in the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when placed in the lower position. You may make it divert. In this case, when raising the sphere, it is not necessary to arrange the sphere between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the raising operation of the sphere can be made smoother.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an additional discharge port may be arranged at a midpoint of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether the discharge is made from the discharge port 1710 or the additional discharge port. In other words, it is difficult to discharge the sphere clogged to the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Moreover, by discharging both outlets at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the sphere can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the sorting device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts the operation based on the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired can be switched depending on the number of balls to be discharged, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly different from each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the resistance of the sphere enters the storage channel 1231 depending on whether or not there is a gap into which the sphere enters (whether the storage channel 1231 is in a full tank state). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may comprise in the aspect which decelerates the predetermined | prescribed sphere which enters into the storage flow path 1231 by whether the number of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is near a full tank state. In this case, even when the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to suppress the winning of more than the specified number. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing the winning of more than the prescribed number, as compared with the case where the balls are decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls. In addition, you may accelerate not only the deceleration. In this case, more than a prescribed number of winnings can be intentionally generated.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball is stored in the storage channel 1231, so that the ball entering the first specific prize winning opening 1000 a is regulated by the stored ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, a non-electrically actuated member may be provided that moves by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and makes it easy to restrict the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be possible to store a prescribed number + 1 sphere. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls that pass the first specific winning opening 1000a beyond the prescribed number to one for each round game R. In this case, for each round, a round in which the eleventh sphere is easy to pass and a round in which the passage of the eleventh sphere is restricted may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held at the position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a (it will fall), so that two balls will not win simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball, and may have a possibility of passing through the first specific prize opening 1000a until the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Further, the presence / absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the channel may be branched toward the outlet. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can remain in the storage channel 1231 when the spheres are discharged from either outlet.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning port 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning port 1000a is less than the prescribed number of winnings (count) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering from the second specific winning port 2255a May be equal to or greater than the prescribed number of winnings (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a game property in which the round time is inevitably extended when a ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a while discharging the whole ball at intervals between rounds.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the sphere that has flowed downward from the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable accessory that can pick up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (falling delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300. The ball may not contact the rib when the opening / closing plate 1300 that slides is open, and the ball may contact the rib when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Thereby, the flow speed of the sphere can be changed even above the opening / closing plate 1300 to delay the flow.

  As a method for preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to bring the sphere to either the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction and arrange the rib on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the flow of the sphere is delayed by the fall delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be disposed on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured by a flow path that curves through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300 so that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing plate 1300 is discharged from the exit again. Since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round starts even if the interval is long. A sufficient section can be secured.

  It is desirable that the entrance is below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the exit is above the opening / closing plate 1300. In addition, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of the sphere can be prevented. In this case, the opening / closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening / closing plate 1300 is open.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the sphere is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side. It is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension board part 3251 may become so gentle that it goes downstream. In this case, the component of gravity acceleration in the flow-down direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The acceleration / deceleration change may be reversed. When the sphere accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent a continuous ball from being formed on the fall delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the drop delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening / closing plate 1300 so that only the sphere that has passed through the opening / closing plate 1300 contacts the opening / closing plate 1300. It is not limited to. For example, a front / rear slide type opening / closing plate is open in a state where a ball enters a pocket in which a prize opening is arranged, and in a closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Ribs that can come into contact with the plate when it reaches the downstream side of the plate may be arranged. A ball that enters the pocket as it is does not come into contact with the rib. In this case, since the sphere can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically below the detection sensor 1240 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which a sphere passing rightward through the detection sensor 1240 can pass is formed, and the sphere is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the opened state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the opening / closing plate 1300.

  This is different from the second fall delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position that passes through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has dropped and landed on the fall delay plate 3250 immediately before the detection sensor 1240 is directly to the right (the detection sensor The ball that has flowed down to the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the same drop once flows down to the left (side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period during which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path through which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path from which the balls that have entered from the second entrance 640 and each of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down joins the storage passage 1231 and the number of entrances is related. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sphere may be allowed to flow into the storage channel 1231 by automatic supply. In this case, it is possible to create a situation where a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case has been described where, in a high-probability state, the profit that the player can obtain decreases as the number of lotteries for winning the jackpot increases. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the profit that the player can obtain may be increased as the number of lottery times until winning the jackpot is increased. In this case, the profits obtained with the jackpot acquired in a short time are small, and the profits obtained with the jackpot acquired over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 corresponding to the number of storages and changes the number of storable balls of the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, since the operation member moves depending on the number of storage regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the operation timing of the operation member being different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed by the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state is not limited to this. For example, the portion (particularly the U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 is moved in the channel extending direction (left-right direction) to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the movement is performed in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the movement has occurred because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a game where the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 protrudes in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms an overhanging state after the sphere is stored and a pattern that forms an overhanging state before the sphere starts to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of storage is 7 and a round in which the number of storage is 9 by a single member.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to an overhanging state in the middle of discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the sphere is discharged and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the mode of discharging the sphere can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points that will not win more than the target number>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And a game preventing means for preventing the ball from passing through the entrance in a state where the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance during a predetermined period. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls rolls on the operating member with unexpected force, extra balls are required between the start of operation of the operating member and the falling of the ball from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number of balls or more may pass through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make it difficult for a predetermined number of balls or more to pass through the detecting means by the ball preventing means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the sphere in the state of being arranged upstream of the entrance, the ease of passage when the sphere passes through the entrance, It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl more than a predetermined number passes a detection opening.

  As the entrance prevention means, means for changing the easiness of passage of the entrance of the sphere according to the detection result of the detection means, or means for making the easiness of passage of the entrance of the sphere constant. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the entrance prevention means includes: an accommodation means that accommodates a ball that has passed through the entrance; an exit port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodation means; A discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a sphere can pass and a second state in which the sphere cannot pass through the discharge port, and the storage means is provided between the entrance and the discharge port. The gaming machine A2 is formed with a capacity for accommodating the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the storage means is formed with a capacity for storing a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the entrance and the exit, so that the discharge switching If the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the storage means, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number of balls from passing through the entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent a predetermined number of balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is formed so that the entrance switching means can be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the housing unit from the entrance while the ball is being discharged from the housing unit. Note that the operation timings of the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means may be the same or different.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is provided with a driving unit that is also used as the discharge switching unit and the ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means is moved from the first state to the first state after the entrance switching means starts a state change from the second state to the first state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that state changes are ordered in a manner of starting state changes toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the housing means after the entrance switching means is in the first state is discharged from the outlet. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching means can be started from the second state before the ball discharge from the discharge port is completed, so the discharge from the discharge port Compared with the case where the operation of the entrance switching means is started after the completion of the game, it is possible to reduce the number of balls passing through the entrance switching means and flowing down the game area to the outlet.

  It should be noted that the order of state changes may be performed by transmitting driving force to each switching means in sequence, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means so as to control the timing. May be.

  Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that it is temporarily (for example, in a specific round) It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodating means. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  In addition, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine with a predetermined number of numerical values changed using the same shape accommodation means (corresponding to the difference in specifications). Thereby, compared with the case where a shape is made for every specification, development cost can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the accommodation means downstream of the first entrance, and the ball that has flowed down the game area is allowed to pass therethrough. A second entrance opening that is switched by the entrance switching means, and when the ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance, and the accommodation from the second entrance When the ball enters the means, the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets from which entrance the ball can pass. Game machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6, both the ball that enters from the first entrance and the ball that enters from the second entrance can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, the space required compared with the case where a separate accommodating means is arrange | positioned for each can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of extending to the inside of the accommodating means, and the interference means interferes with a sphere that is projected and stored inside the accommodating means; and the accommodating means The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is configured to change the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means depending on when it is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls accommodated can be changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the ball entry path to the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the gaming area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured so that a ball can be arranged on the front side when retracted. Game machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retraction can be hidden with a ball arranged in front. As a result, the operation of the interference means can be made inconspicuous while no additional shielding member is required.

<Points to reduce the useless balls in the interval while suppressing overwinning>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance The delay means for delaying the flow of the sphere at the upstream position of the entrance when the entrance switching means is in the second state, compared to the case where the entrance switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means by dropping the ball that was on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, is it possible to launch the ball so that a ball falling from the operating member does not occur? Depending on whether or not (the level of the player's launching technique), there was a problem that some of the actual balls were generated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entrance is not guided to the ball entrance, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the sphere, it is possible to easily place the sphere at the upstream position of the entrance, until the entrance switching means switches to the first state. If the entrance switching means is in the first state while there is a ball upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. Thereby, since the influence which the player's launching technology has on the actual number of balls can be reduced, a game machine friendly to beginners can be configured.

  The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be constituted by a horizontally long member that supports the sphere from below, and may be a drop restricting means that restricts the fall to the end, or may be a protruding means formed from a protrusion that decelerates the sphere by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with the case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball rises in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention of the sphere flowing down along the delay means Can be improved.

  In addition, the level of the degree of delay is not limited in any way. For example, the speed of the sphere may be high or low, or the level of the backflow of the sphere when the entrance switching unit is switched from the second state to the first state may be used.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured to have a shape in which the distance between the ball disposed on the downstream side and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than the ball disposed on the upstream side. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in a manner in which the distance between the opening direction of the entrance and the ball is increased when arranged on the downstream side of the delay means. Therefore, when the ball rushes down the delay means, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching unit includes an ascending unit that ascends the game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay unit includes the first unit A gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the rising means in the state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the rising means in the first state, so that the ball is removed from the entrance switching means. The ball can be delayed with the player visually recognizing it falling. Thereby, attention with respect to a sphere can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is provided on the upstream side of the ball flow path with respect to the ascending means, and includes a rising restricting means for restricting the ascending movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the rising movement of the ball is restricted by the rising restriction means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. It is possible to prevent the sphere from flying in an unexpected direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B6 is provided with a relief entrance that allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent restriction means to enter and gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit that occurs when the ball passes through the entrance due to the ball that is loaded and flew when the ascent means is raised It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. Thereby, even if it is a case where a ball | bowl is removed from the flow-down path | route to a entrance, it can prevent that attention power falls and can improve a player's interest by movement of a ball | bowl.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the delay means includes a variable action section that has a different action on the ball depending on a difference in a manner of reaching the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be varied depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. Thereby, it can select for every ball | bowl and can give a different effect | action.

  In addition, the mode of the difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, the difference in the arrival position of the sphere with reference to the entrance may be used, or the difference in the flow direction of the sphere until the delay means is reached.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position that is separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, and is separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. A gaming machine B8 that does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and is not in time to switch the state of the entrance switching means, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action unit. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by making the variable action portion not act on a ball far from the entrance and sufficiently in time for the change of the state of the entrance switching means.

<Points to adjust the hit of the jackpot game>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance In the case where the entrance switching means maintains the first state, a ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed previously. A gaming machine C1 comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the number changing means determines the number of balls passing through the entrance when the entrance switching means forms the first state. Since it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the entrance when one state is formed, in a series of operation patterns in which the entrance switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the benefits given to the player Adjustments can be made.

  The method for adjusting profits is not limited. For example, if the entrance switching means has formed the first state before, the entrance switching means has entered the first state next time due to having passed a number of balls through the entrance. It may be an aspect that suppresses the number of balls that can be entered into the mouth, or if the ball entry switching means forms the first state next due to a similar event, the player's profit (not limited to balls) For example, an aspect in which acquisition of the right to shift to a high probability state may be employed may be employed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means for storing a ball that has passed through the entrance, a discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits the storage means, and a discharge port for the ball. A discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the housing unit due to a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of balls stored in the storage means can be changed by the operation mode switching means so that the balls remain in the storage means. And the number of residual balls can be made variable. Thereby, it is possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodating means is filled with spheres, and it is possible to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  In addition, the mode of the difference in operation mode is not limited at all. For example, different operation periods are used, and when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, whether the discharge switching means disposed in which discharge port is operated (operation target) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining a discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the discharge interval of the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharge is performed regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period during which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the outlet can be changed strictly according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  Note that the mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received by the sphere immediately before the discharge port from the following sphere is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the storage means A rib that protrudes and decelerates the ball by applying a load to the ball may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the interval maintaining means includes a projecting portion projecting from the inner surface of the housing means in the flow down path of the sphere in the vicinity of the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion protrudes into the flow-down path, the ball close to the discharge port is brought into contact with the protruding portion and decelerated, thereby reducing the distance from the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow velocity from changing greatly between a sphere having a short distance from the discharge port and to make the sphere flow velocity uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path that causes the balls to flow down in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions are staggered from the opposing surfaces constituting the discharge path. The gaming machine C5 is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately projected from the facing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portion collides with the ball flowing down the discharge path to While being displaced in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow-down direction, it is possible to cause the bumps to collide with the protrusions at predetermined intervals, and the action of decelerating the sphere can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a flow velocity of a ball is formed to be larger than a flow velocity of a ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the ball that rolls on the rolling discharge plate part flows down at a higher speed than the ball that flows down the discharge path, so that the ball stored in the storage means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the outlet can be kept constant.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the entrance is provided with a start opening for determining a big hit of a special symbol by passing the ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of special symbol jackpot determinations and the number of balls entering the entrance can be associated. As a result, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of special symbol determinations required until the big hit.

  The gaming machine C7 includes a starting ball passage switching unit that switches whether or not a ball that has passed through the starting port can enter the housing unit, and the starting ball passage switching unit operates in conjunction with the incoming ball switching unit. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices disposed can be reduced.

  By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are arranged in the housing means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining spheres can be changed.

  In this case, since the number of spheres remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the sphere is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, the flow-down speed of the sphere flowing down the storage device has changed. Even in this case, the number of spheres discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branch channel for distributing spheres may be arranged upstream thereof. Anyway.

  Moreover, the operation | movement aspect of a 1st discharge port and a 2nd discharge port is not limited. For example, one of them may be opened, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be shortened as compared with the case of discharging the balls from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end portion of the housing means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the storage means regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the number of balls stored in the storage means, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily maintained constant. In addition, even if the number of shots of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains in the housing means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the housing means.

  In this case, from the state where the same number of balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last discharged balls are discharged by the operation mode of the discharge switching means. It can be made difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the sphere from the behavior at the start. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which outlet the ball to be discharged last is discharged from, the attention to the flow-down mode of the ball can be improved.

<Points to adjust the hit of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance A switching drive means for switching and driving the incoming ball switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the incoming opening while the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; After the start of the switching drive by the switching drive means, a post-drive entry ball state switching means capable of forming an allowable state that allows passage of the sphere to the entrance and a restriction state that restricts passage of the sphere, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the post-driving entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance is closed by the switching drive means, so extra balls can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of winning balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the permissible state is formed at the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the prescribed number of cases when the ball passes through the first entrance and when the ball passes through the second entrance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the entrance switching means to open the entrance.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance has a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is from the front side of the opening of the first entrance. Is configured in such a manner that a ball disposed on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first entrance, the ball is dropped while the entrance switching means maintains the second state. Can be dropped and moved away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent spheres exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And a receiving means for storing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the storage means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second entrance are joined.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first entrance or the second entrance join together within the housing means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls. The number of spheres that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in association with the number of spheres that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance when the accommodation means is empty, and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance is different from the number of balls that can enter the second entrance. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance is opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before the opening of the first entrance and the second entrance after the opening of the first entrance. It is possible to vary the substantial profit given to the player by the passed ball.

  That is, when passing through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance has passed through the second entrance, Since the minute is not discharged and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, the number is the same as the number that can be accommodated in the second entrance from the first entrance. The player can only get the same benefits as passing the number of players.

  On the other hand, when passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can gain additional benefits.

<Points where interference members protrude>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance And an interference means that is arranged in a flow path of the sphere that has passed through the entrance, and that can be switched between an overhanging state capable of interfering with the sphere and a retracted state not interfering with the sphere. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the jackpot game of the actuating member arranged at the big prize opening is defined as a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round when the ball is open for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner of launching each ball, so it is very big for the winning ball throughout the jackpot game. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the interference means is disposed in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entrance, so that the interference means is maintained in an overhanging state, so that the entrance to the interference means can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the balls from passing through the entrance by blocking the balls in the path. Thereby, the prize ball can be adjusted throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 comprising stopping means for stopping the ball before the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state with the ball stopped before the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to, the movement can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the operation.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the sphere that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the sphere that has passed through the detecting means is passed through. A gaming machine F3 that is configured to be capable of changing the state of the interference means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, since the state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured in a plurality of types, while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<Point 1 makes it difficult to predict the possibility of winning a V prize from the attacker's actions>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, In a game machine comprising a profit switching means that can be switched in the operating mode with the same condition for maintaining the ball switching means in the first state, when the ball can pass through the profit granting means, and the profit The grant means can be switched between when the ball cannot pass. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball going to the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball that entered the big prize opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball switching means in the first state are the same, the ball can pass through the profit granting means and the ball passes through the profit granting means. Since it is possible to switch between when it is impossible, it does not block the ball entering the entrance. Thereby, the attention with respect to the sphere which goes to the entrance can be maintained.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping unit that is arranged upstream of the profit switching unit and is switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting unit is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting unit is allowed to pass. As the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stationary means is switched from the stationary state to the passing state, and a ball that has flowed downstream of the stationary means is the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching the means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the ball that has passed through the entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball can be profited at an arbitrary timing. Reaching the switching means can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching unit at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the ball switching unit is in the first state. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping unit can reach the profit switching unit after the stopping unit is switched to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can reach the profit switching means changes after the ball passes the stopping means by the period changing means, so that after the ball passes the stopping means It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game performance of the player, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  The period changing means may be a means for changing the flow velocity of the sphere passing through the stopping means, a means for delaying a period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the sphere starts flowing down, Means for changing the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means may be used.

  In the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls stopped by the stopping means can be switched in accordance with the benefit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted by the number of balls stopped by the stopping means, so attention to the balls stopped by the stopping means The power can be improved.

  In addition, the means for switching the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is passed is extremely shortened and immediately after that the period during which the ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened, Since the number of spheres flowing down downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new sphere does not enter from the entrance, a large number of spheres are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, after taking a sufficiently long period of time to pass the stopping means, immediately after that, when extremely shortening the period of turning the incoming ball switching means to the first state, In addition to the fact that the majority of the spheres flow downstream of the stopping means and no new spheres enter the entrance, there are almost no spheres stopping at the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the stopping means is stopped regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entrance switching unit includes setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closing maintenance periods for maintaining the second state, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closing maintenance period The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after elapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of periods during which the ball switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball is the stopping means. Since the period until the profit switching means is switched to the first state after passing through is formed in a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, the game ball can change the profit granting means. The case of passing and the case of not passing can be controlled to be formable. Accordingly, it is possible to continuously improve attention to the flow of the sphere.

  In addition, for example, a period in which the entrance switching means is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, the entrance switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closing maintenance period in an extremely short form (shorter than the ball that has passed through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the incoming ball switching means immediately enters the first state. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means is in the passing state to when the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit granting means regardless of the timing at which the ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a sphere that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit granting means, regardless of the number of spheres that stop at the stopping means and the mode (for example, timing) of the stopping.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is not a first operation caused by a prescribed number of balls entering the entrance, but a second operation caused by the passage of a prescribed time. A gaming machine G6 comprising intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selection means, the switching operation of the ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching due to the passage mode of the ball at the entrance. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching unit is in the first state.

  In addition, as an intentional selection means, it is illustrated that the sphere does not pass through the entrance by passing less than the specified number of spheres. This can be realized by intentionally clogging the ball that is passing through the entrance (not allowing it to pass).

<Point 2, which makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's action, has a paca>
A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched at a time; and a mode in which a ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by an operation mode of the ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball going to the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball that entered the big prize opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching means while maintaining a state where the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the sphere reaches the profit switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is configured such that a number of balls related to the time when the entrance switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length that the ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player with respect to the operation of the entry switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching unit is formed while the ball switching unit is switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means for the first time in the start state, the operation of the entrance switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it can also be set to the first state again, it is possible to form a game that the ball feeding to the profit switching means is not always started just because the operation is started from the first state. Thereby, since it becomes necessary to confirm directly whether the sphere reaches the profit switching means, it is possible to improve attention to the profit switching means.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine Z1 to play. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 110 main control device (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, start entrance)
640a Electric accessories (part of the ball switching means)
1000a First specific winning entrance (part of entrance entrance, 1st entrance entrance)
1140 Protruding part (part of interval maintaining means, protruding part)
1150 Discharge port (part of entrance prevention means, part of number change means)
1231 Reservation channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive entry ball state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of spacing maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintaining means, protruding part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening and closing plate (part of entrance switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Entry prevention part (part of entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching drive means)
1600, 2600 Restriction member (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 2nd storage flow path (a part of the entrance prevention means, a part of the number change means, a part of the after-drive entry state switching means, the accommodation means, the discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specific winning entrance (part of entrance entrance, 2nd entrance entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of entrance switching means)
3181 Additional winning entrance (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (rising restriction means)
3250 Fall delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End surface (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit-giving means)
4850 Sorting device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit granting means)
5900 Departure adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means)
7260 2nd fall delay plate (a part of delay means, variable action part)

Claims (3)

A game area where a ball flows down, a entrance where a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entrance can be guided to the entrance, and the entrance A ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detecting means for detecting the entrance to the entrance, and the entrance Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state capable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, and a second state incapable of guiding the ball to the profit granting means, In a gaming machine comprising profit switching means that can be switched at
The gaming machine is configured such that the manner in which a ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching unit.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a number of balls related to a time when the ball switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit.   3. The start state in which the pitching of the ball to the profit switching unit is started while the ball switching unit is switched from the first state to the second state is formed according to claim 1. Game machines.

Images